Onkyo Tx Nr905 Users Manual NR905_En

Onkyo-Tx-Nr905-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr905-owner-s-manual

TX-NR905 to the manual 4bb86f49-def7-d314-45e0-537842709375

2015-01-24

: Onkyo Onkyo-Tx-Nr905-Users-Manual-233124 onkyo-tx-nr905-users-manual-233124 onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 136

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TX-NR905_En.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Contents
Introduction ..................................... 2

AV Receiver

TX-NR905

Connection .................................... 22

Turning On & First Time Setup..... 50

Instruction Manual

Basic Operation
Playing your AV components ....... 68
Listening to the Radio .................. 69

Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 79

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.

Advanced Operation ..................... 94

Troubleshooting .......................... 131

TX-NR905_En.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

WARNING

AVIS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.

Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

10.

11.
12.

13.
14.

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
S3125A
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
gap for warm air to escape.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.

For North American model
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.

For U.S. models
FCC Information for User

CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.

Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Precautions—Continued
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue:
Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.

IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for
the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.

For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
K. MIYAGI

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

TX-NR905_En.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Contents
Features ............................................................ 6
Supplied Accessories ...................................... 7
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 8
Getting to Know the AV Receiver ................... 9
Front Panel ...................................................................9
Display .......................................................................11
Rear Panel ..................................................................12

Remote Controller .......................................... 15
Installing the Batteries ...............................................15
Using the Remote Controller .....................................15
About the Remote Controller Modes .........................16
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ...........................................16
DVD Mode .................................................................18
CD/MD/CDR Modes .................................................19
DOCK Mode ..............................................................20
NET/USB Mode .........................................................21

Connecting Your Speakers ........................... 22
Enjoying Home Theater .............................................22
Connecting Your Speakers ........................................23
Bi-amping Front Speakers A .....................................27
Bridging Front Speakers A ........................................28
Bi-amping Front Speakers B ......................................29
Bridging Front Speakers B .........................................30

AM Frequency Step Setup(on some models) ............67

Playing Your AV Components .......................68
Basic AV Receiver Operation ................................... 68

Listening to the Radio ....................................69
Listening to AM/FM Stations .................................... 69
Using RDS ................................................................. 71
Presetting AM/FM Stations ....................................... 73
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only) ................................. 74

Common Functions ........................................76
Setting the Display Brightness ................................... 76
Adjusting Speaker Levels .......................................... 76
Muting the AV Receiver ............................................ 76
Using the Sleep Timer ............................................... 77
Using Headphones ..................................................... 77
Displaying Source Information .................................. 77
Selecting Audio Inputs .............................................. 78
Specifying the Digital Signal Format ........................ 78

Using the Listening Modes ............................79
Selecting the Listening Modes ................................... 79
Listening Modes Available for
Each Source Format ................................................ 80
About the Listening Modes ....................................... 84

Connecting Antennas .................................... 31

Recording ........................................................87

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna ..........................31
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ............................31
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna .........................32
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna ........................32

Onscreen Setup Menus ..................................88

Connecting Your Components ..................... 33

Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................89

About AV Connections ..............................................33
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to
the AV Receiver ......................................................34
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................34
Connecting a TV or Projector ....................................36
Connecting a DVD player ..........................................37
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback ..................39
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording ................40
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial
Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................41
Connecting Components with HDMI ........................42
Connecting a Game Console ......................................44
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component ...45
Connecting a CD Player .............................................46
Connecting a Turntable ..............................................46
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT
Recorder ..................................................................47
Connecting a Power Amplifier ..................................47
Connecting an RI Dock ..............................................48
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
(North American and European models only) ........48
Connecting Onkyo
Components ........................49
Connecting the Power Cord .......................................49

Using the Re-EQ Function ......................................... 89
Using the Late Night Function .................................. 89
Audio Adjust .............................................................. 90
Listening Mode Presets .............................................. 92

Turning On the AV Receiver .......................... 50
Turning On and Standby ............................................50

First Time Setup ............................................. 51
Speaker Settings .........................................................51
HDMI Monitor Setup .................................................52
HDMI Input Setup .....................................................54
Component Video Input Setup ...................................56
Changing the Input Display .......................................57
Digital Input Setup .....................................................58
Analog Input Setup ....................................................59
Picture Quality Menu ..................................................60
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...61
TV Format Setup (not North American models) .......66

Recording the Input Source ....................................... 87
Recording from Different AV Sources ...................... 87
Menu Map .................................................................. 88

Advanced Setup ..............................................94
Speaker Setup ............................................................ 94
Source Setup ............................................................ 103
Miscellaneous Setup ................................................ 106
Hardware Setup ....................................................... 108
Lock Setup ............................................................... 110

NET/USB ........................................................111
About NET/USB ...................................................... 111
Connecting the AV Receiver ................................... 112
Playing Music Files on a Server .............................. 113
Windows Media Player 11 Setup ............................ 114
Playing Music Files on a USB Device .................... 114
Listening to Internet Radio ...................................... 116
Network Settings ..................................................... 117

Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................119
Connecting Zone 2 ................................................... 119
Connecting Zone 3 ................................................... 120
Powered Zone 2 Setting ........................................... 121
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ..................................... 122
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 ......................................... 122
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
and Multiroom Control Kits .................................. 125

Controlling Other Components ...................126
Entering Remote Control Codes .............................. 126
Resetting the Remote Controller ............................. 127
Learning Commands ................................................ 129
Using Macros ........................................................... 130

Troubleshooting ...........................................131
Specifications ...............................................135

TX-NR905_En.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Features
Amplifier

Tuner

• 7-channel amplifier
• 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%
(FTC)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• Speakers A and Speakers B configurations
• Powered Zone 2 capability
• Bi-amp and bridging capability for front speakers
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all channels
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) transformer

• XM*8 Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)

Processing
• THX*1 Surround EX
• THX Ultra2*1 certified
• Dolby*2 Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• DTS*3, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
• Neural Surround*4, THX-Neural
• Theater-Dimensional*5 virtual surround sound
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
• Re-EQ*6 function
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
• 7-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer

* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.

• SIRIUS*9 Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Others
• Network-ready for playing music files on a networked
computer or media server, or for listening to Internet
radio
• USB port for playing music files on USB mass storage
devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players)
• Supports MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A file formats
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction*11
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
• IR IN and OUT
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
*1

THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.

Audio/Video
• Zone 2 with 12V trigger, level, tone, balance, pre out,
and composite video output
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and pre out
• 4 HDMI*7 inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to composite video conversion
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 1 output
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
• RS-232 control
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out

HD Radio reception (N. America only)
40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. America only)
40 AM/FM presets (other models)
AM/FM auto tuning
RDS radio data
Direct tuning

*3
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
*4
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*5
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Features—Continued

Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:

*7
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
*8
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)

©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

Speaker setup microphone

*10
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

Indoor FM antenna

*11

“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.

“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.

Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right

Center

Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right

Center

Surround
Right
Surround
Right

Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left
Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left

Center

Surround
Left
Surround
Left

Surround
Right
Surround
Right

Center

Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right

Surround
Left
Surround
Left

2
3

Speaker Cable

Speaker cable labels
*

Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left

Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)

Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right

THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.

AM loop antenna

Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Multiroom Capability
You can use four speaker systems with this AV receiver—Speakers A: a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1
channels) for enjoying DVD movies in your main room, Speakers B: a pair of stereo speakers for serious music listening in your main room, Zone 2: a stereo speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a third
room. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Speakers A: Enjoy up to 7.1-channel surround-sound playback (see page 23).
You can enjoy the various listening modes, such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 79–86).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 119).
Speakers B: Use a pair for stereo speakers for serious music listening in main room (see page 23).
*Can be used with the subwoofer, center, surround, or surround back speakers as required (see page 97).
Zone 2: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback in a second room (see page 119).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required if Speakers B is used.
Zone 3: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in a third room (see page 120).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.

Main Room: Speakers A and Speakers B
Front Speakers B
Surround back left and right
speakers *
Front Speakers A

While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 121).

Subwoofer *
Center speaker *

Surround left and right speakers *

* Can be used with Speakers A
and Speakers B.

Zone 2 Room

Left and right
stereo speakers

Zone 3 Room

Left and right
stereo speakers

TX-NR905_En.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver
Front Panel

3 Not North American model
2 45 6

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

Front flap

Push here to open
the flap

The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

A STANDBY/ON button (50)
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.

B STANDBY indicator (50)
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.

C READY indicator (109)
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
HDMI Power Control is enabled.

D ZONE 2 indicator (123)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.

E ZONE 3 indicator (123)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 3 is on.

F Remote-control sensor (15)
Receives control signals from the remote controller.

I MASTER VOLUME control (68)
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 106.

J PURE AUDIO button and indicator (79)
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indicator lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.

K AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.

L Input selector buttons (68)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO, NET/USB.

G Display
See “Display” on page 11.

H DISPLAY button (77)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
North American model

N OP Q RS TUV W X

Y Z a

b
PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

PHONES

DIMMER

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

S VIDEO

ENTER

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Other models

T
PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

M PHONES jack (77)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a standard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.

N ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (123)
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or
Zone 3.

O LEVEL button (124)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.

P TONE button (124)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).

Q HDMI OUT button (54)
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.

R STEREO button (79)
Selects the Stereo listening mode.

S THX button (79)
Selects the THX listening modes.

T DIMMER (RT/PTY/TP) button (72, 76)
Adjusts the display brightness.
On models other than the North American model,
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with
RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using RDS” on
page 71.

U MEMORY button (73)
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.

V TUNING MODE button (69)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.

W SETUP button
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.

X TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER
buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [ ]
[ ] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRESET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio presets (see page 73). With the onscreen setup menus,
they work as arrow buttons and are used to select
and set items. The ENTER button is also used with
the onscreen setup menus.

Y RETURN button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.

Z USB port
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A) can be plugged in here and the
music selected and played through the AV receiver.

a SETUP MIC (61)
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.

b AUX 2 INPUT (45, 87)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
c Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (90, 124)
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.

e LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.

f POWER switch (50)

d DIGITAL INPUT button (59)

American models do not have this switch.

Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.

This is the main power switch. When set to OFF, the
AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be set
to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.

Display

12 3 4 5

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

1 Speaker/channel indicators (84)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
–

: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

FL: Front left
C: Center
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
SBR: Surround back right

2 BTL indicator (51)
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to
BTL for bridged front speaker operation.

3 A and B indicators (68)
Indicate which speaker set is selected: A or B.

4 ZONE 2 indicator (123)
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.

5 Listening mode and format indicators (79)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.

6 Tuning indicators (69)
HD (North American model only) (74): Lights
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD
Radio technology.
SPS (North American model only) (75):
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s
transmitting secondary multicast channels.
RDS (71): Lights up when tuned to a radio station
that supports RDS (Radio Data System).
AUTO (69): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Manual Tuning mode is selected.
TUNED (69): Lights up when tuned to a radio station.
FM STEREO (69): Lights up when tuned to a stereo FM station.

7 SLEEP indicator (77)
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.

8 Audyssey indicator (61)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.

9 Headphone indicator (77)
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.

0 Message area
Displays various information.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
A Audio input indicators (74, 78)

B Volume level (68)

Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.

Displays the volume level.

C MUTING indicator (76)

While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,
the ANALOG indicator lights up.

Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.

Rear Panel
North American model only

78
12 3

Not North American model

North American model
only

9 J KL M N O

5 6

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

HD RADIO

XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ANTENNA

ETHERNET

SIRIUS

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

FM75
AM

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ANTENNA

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

FM
75

CR/PR

IN 3

AC OUTLET

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

PRE OUT

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L

FRONT L

Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

R S T
A

U V W X YZ

REMOTE CONTROL
This
(Remote Interactive) jack can be connected to the
jack on another
-capable
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
To use
, you must make an analog audio connection (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.

B RS232
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
automation equipment and external controllers.

C PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.

D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for connecting components with a component video output,
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which

means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 56.

E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input.

F HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) connections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 54.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or projector with an HDMI input.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
G SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).

H XM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM
instructions).

I MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.

J AM ANTENNA (not North American model)
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.

K ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.

L FM ANTENNA (not North American model)
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.

M IR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be connected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
A commercially available IR emitter can be connected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.

N 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.

O ETHERNET port
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.

P AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio) (on North
American model)
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.

Q AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.

R DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connecting components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 58.

S DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 58.
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.

T GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.

U CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.

V TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,
etc.

W AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.

X GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.

Y CBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.

Z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.

a DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for connecting the video signal.

b FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
Speakers A, center, surround, and surround back
speakers.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers A and surround back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers A. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” and “Bridging Front Speakers A” on
page 28.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
c MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio output, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.

d PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multichannel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUBWOOFER jack is for connecting a powered subwoofer.

e PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.

f ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
Zone 2 or front Speakers B.
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers B and surround back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers B. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” and “Bridging Front Speakers A” on
page 28.

g AC OUTLET (North American and European
models only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and number of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV receiver.

See pages 22–49 for hookup information.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.

Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator

AV receiver

30˚

Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.

Slide the cover shut.

Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.

30˚

Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)

Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote controller may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obstacle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.

RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV
receiver. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via
.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.

■ DVD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufacturers (see page 126).

B
C

■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 126).

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

INPUT

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

DVD

VCR

5
F

H
I

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see right column
DVD mode: see page 18
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 19
DOCK mode: see page 20
NET/USB mode: see page 21
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 128

ZONE3

ZONE2

RECEIVER
SLEEP

P
TO

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER
U
MEN

MEN
U

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

E XI

DISPLAY

P
Q
R

RN
RETU
MUTING

1
RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

J
K

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

CDR/MD/DOCK

RECEIVER

REC

Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
a mode.

TV VOL

REMOTE MODE

■ TV and VCR Modes
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see
page 126).

■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 122).

MACRO

TAPE/AMP

■ NET/USB Mode
This mode is for playing music files on a networked
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

■ DOCK Mode
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. You must enter the appropriate remote control
code first (see page 126).

■ CABLE/SAT Mode
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 126).

T
U
V

Note:
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other components.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.

T Re-EQ button (89)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.

A STANDBY button (50)
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.

B ON button (50)
Turns on the AV receiver.

C INPUT SELECTOR buttons (68)

U L NIGHT button (89)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.

V AUDIO SEL button (78)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.

Used to select the input source.

D MACRO buttons (130)
Used with the Macro function.

E DIMMER button (76)
Adjusts the display brightness.

F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.

G CH +/– button (73)
Selects radio presets.

H SETUP button
Used to change settings.

I DISPLAY button (77)
Displays information about the current input source.

J LISTENING MODE buttons (79)
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons can be used at any time, regardless of the currently selected remote controller mode.

K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+
buttons (76, 99)
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.

L LIGHT button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.

■ TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1 Previous and Next [
]/[
] buttons
The Previous [
] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [
] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [
]/[
] buttons may not work properly with some cassette tapes.
Play [ ] button
Starts playback.
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
Reverse Play [ ] button
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
REC [ ] button
Starts recording.

M D.TUN button (70)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.

N REMOTE MODE buttons (16)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for
the currently selected mode lights up.

O SLEEP button (77)
Used with the Sleep function.

P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (68)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.

Q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing settings.

R MUTING button (76)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.

S SP A and SP B buttons (8, 23)
Used to select Speakers A or Speakers B.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

DVD Mode

Sets the DVD player to Standby.

To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.

B ON button
Turns on the DVD player.

C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.

D TOP MENU button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.

A
B
C

E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

Used to navigate menus and select items.

TV
INPUT

F DISC +/– button

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

G SETUP button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

Selects discs on a DVD changer.

H DISPLAY button

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD/DOCK

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER

DVD
RECEIVER

PM
TO

ENU

MEN
U

G
H

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

SE
TUP

E XI

K AUDIO button

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

MUTING

Opens and closes the disc tray.
REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

M CLEAR button

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

SP B

N MENU button

LISTENING MODE

Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).

L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

J
K

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
Used with the repeat playback function.

I Playback buttons

J REPEAT button

Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

Displays a DVD’s menu.

Q
R

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

RC-687M

Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.

P RANDOM button

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL

O RETURN button

Used with the random playback function.

Q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.

R SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.

S VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

CD/MD/CDR Modes

Sets the component to Standby.

To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote controller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 126).

B ON button
Set the component to On or Standby.

C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.

D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.

E DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.

F DISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.

A
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

B
C

INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.

H REC [ ] button

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

G Playback buttons

Starts recording.

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
CD

DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

Used with some components.

M RANDOM button

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

Used with the random playback function.
ID E

SE
TUP

E XI

N PLAY MODE button

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

MUTING

7
8

Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.

L RETURN button

MEN
U

J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button

Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

SLEEP

ENU
PM

Used with the repeat playback function.

K CLEAR button

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

CDR/MD/DOCK

I REPEAT button

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.

SP B

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

TX-NR905_En.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A STANDBY button

DOCK Mode

Turns off the iPod.

Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the DOCK remote controller
mode.
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the
appropriate remote control code (see page 126).
When Using an RI Dock:
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV
IN L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 57).
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.

B ON button*
Turns on the iPod.

C TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.

D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.

E ALBUM +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.

F DISPLAY button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.

G Previous [

] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.

H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)

A
ON

I Rewind [

STANDBY

] button
Press and hold to rewind.

INPUT
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.

K REPEAT button*

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

J PLAYLIST [

Used with the repeat function.

TV VOL

L MENU button*

Used to access menus.

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

ZONE2

CDR/MD/DOCK

C
4

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

CDR/MD/DOCK

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

PM
TO

ENU

MEN
U

+
CH

6
7
8
9

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

N
TUR

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

M
N
O
P
Q

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

N Next [

] button
Selects the next song.
Stops playback and displays a menu.

Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)

O Stop [ ] button

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

M Play [ ] button

P Fast Forward [

] button
Press and hold to fast forward.

Q RANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.

R PLAY MODE button
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Remote Controller—Continued
A Number buttons

NET/USB Mode

Used to enter track numbers.

NET/USB mode is for playing music files on a networked computer, media server, or USB mass storage
device, or for listening to Internet radio.
To set the remote controller to NET/USB mode, press
the [NET/USB] REMOTE MODE button.

B Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.

C CH +/– button
Used to select Internet radio stations.

D SETUP button
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.

E Previous [

] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.

F Pause [ ] button
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass
storage device.

TV
INPUT

G REPEAT button

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

Used with the repeat playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.

H RETURN button

TV VOL

Returns to the previous display.

I Play [ ] button

MACRO

ZONE3

Starts playback.

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

P
TO

U
MEN

MEN
U

L RANDOM button

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

] button
Selects the next song.
Stops playback.

J Next [

K Stop [ ] button

SLEEP

DIMMER

NET/USB
RECEIVER

ID E

SE
TUP

E XI

RN
RETU

DISPLAY

MUTING

5
6
REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

8
9
J
K

Used with the random playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.

SP B

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

TX-NR905_En.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.

Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.

Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position. In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.

Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Position them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.

Tip: To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position

1/3 of wall
position

Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Connecting Your Speakers
About Speakers A and Speakers B
Speakers A and Speakers B allows you to have two speaker configurations of up to 7.1 speakers. Each configuration has
its own pair of stereo front speakers and can use the same subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back speakers, as
required. You could, for example, use Speakers A when watching a DVD movie with 7.1-channels surround sound and
use Speakers B for serious music listening with a pair of stereo speakers and the subwoofer (2.1-channels).
The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 51 and “Speaker Setup” on page 94.
Front Speakers A and front Speakers B can be wired normally, bi-amped, or bridged, but A and B cannot be bi-amped
or bridged at the same time. For example, if front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B can only be wired normally.
Similarly, if front Speakers B are bi-amped, Speakers A can only be wired normally. When bridging is used, the AV
receiver can drive 2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you're using a powered subwoofer). When bi-amping is
used, the AV receiver can drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room. See pages 27–30 for more information.
The Speakers A and Speakers B configurations are selected by using the [SP A] and [SP B] buttons on the remote
controller. Only one configuration can be selected at a time.
The versatility offered by the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations means you can configure the AV receiver to
suit your exact requirements and application. Two typical applications are shown below.
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A and
Stereo Playback with Speakers B
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is used for serious music listening with a
pair of top-quality stereo speakers.

■ 7.1-channel Playback with Bridged Front
Speakers
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is bridged for use with a pair of highpower stereo speakers, the subwoofer is used with
Speakers A and Speakers B.

Speakers B
Speakers B
FL

FR
FL

SL
SBL

Subwoofer
used with A
and B

Speakers A

SBR
SBL

SBR

2-1.Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)

6ohms
Normal
Normal

2-2.Speaker Config

2-1.Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)

2-2.Speaker Config

Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back

Use
Use
Use
Use
Use

2-2.Speaker Config

Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back

Use
Use
Use
Use
Use

2-2.Speaker Config

Speakers B
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back

6ohms
Normal
BTL

Not Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use

Speakers B
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back

Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use

TX-NR905_En.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Speaker Configuration

Connecting a Powered Subwoofer

For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.

Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered subwoofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.

The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
Number of speakers:

Front left

✓

Front right

✓

Center

✓

Surround left

✓

Powered
subwoofer

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

CR/PR

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

OPTICAL

✓

Surround right

✓

LINE INPUT

✓

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

SURR L

PRE OUT
FRONT L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

✓

Surround back*

FRONT R (BTL)

Surround back left

✓

Surround back right

✓

LINE INPUT

* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.

No matter how many speakers you use, a powered subwoofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automatically (see page 61) or manually (see page 94).

Using Dipole Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.
Normal speakers

Dipole speakers
1

TV/screen

1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker

TV/screen

FRONT L (BTL)

6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

PRE
SU

TX-NR905_En.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Speaker Connection Precautions

Attaching the Speaker Labels

Read the following before connecting your speakers:

The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)

• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 51). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker terminal. Doing so may damage the
AV receiver.
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.

Speaker terminal
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Surround left
Surround right
Surround back left
Surround back right

Color
White
Red
Green
Blue
Gray
Brown
Tan

The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All you
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.

Connecting the Speaker Cables

Strip about 5/8" (15
mm) of insulation from
the ends of the
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.

Unscrew the terminal.

Fully insert the bare wire.

Screw the terminal tight.

5/8" (15 mm)

TX-NR905_En.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for 7.1-channel playback
with Speakers A.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker
HDMI

Center speaker

Front left speaker

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R

ZONE2 R

FRONT R

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

PRE OUT

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L

FRONT L

Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

FRONT R

Surround back
right speaker

SURR R

CENTER

Surround right
speaker

SURR L

FRONT L

Surround left
speaker

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

Surround back
left speaker

■ 7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A or Speakers B
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for up to 7.1-channel
playback with Speakers A or Speakers B.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
HDMI

Front right
speaker A

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

Center speaker

Front left
speaker A

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

FRONT

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

IN 3

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

PRE OUT

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L

FRONT L

Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

Front right
speaker B

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

FRONT R

Surround back
right speaker

SURR R

Surround right
speaker

CENTER

SURR L

Surround left
speaker

FRONT L

SURR BACK L

ZONE2 L

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

Surround back
left speaker

Front left
speaker B

Notes:
• When Speakers A is selected, the front left speaker A and front right speaker A become the main front speakers. When
Speakers B is selected, the front left speaker B and front right speaker B become the main front speakers.
• The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 51 and “Speaker Setup” on page 94.
• You can choose which of the spakers you want to use with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations (see
page 97).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup

Bi-amping Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers A and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers A, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front A setting to Bi-Amp to
enable bi-amping (see page 51).
• When front Speakers A are biamped, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.

Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

CR/PR

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(VCR/DVR)

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

PRE OUT

FRONT L

SURR BACK L

ZONE2 L

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

FRONT R

FRONT L

FRONT R (BTL)

SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

FRONT L (BTL)

Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)

Right speaker

Left speaker

TX-NR905_En.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup

Bridging Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front A setting to BTL to enable
bridging (see page 51).
• When front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speakers can handle the additional power.

Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

CR/PR

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R

ZONE2 R

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

SURR L

PRE OUT
FRONT L

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

FRONT R (BTL)

Right speaker

FRONT R

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT L

SURR BACK L

FRONT L (BTL)

Left speaker

Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

TX-NR905_En.book Page 29 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup

Bi-amping Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers B and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers B, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the ZONE 2 L/R terminal posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front B setting to Bi-Amp to
enable bi-amping (see page 51).
• When front Speakers B are biamped, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.

Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

CR/PR

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(VCR/DVR)

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURR L

FRONT L

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L

ZONE2 L

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

ZONE2 R

SURR BACK R

SURR BACK L

ZONE2 L

ASSIGNABLE

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Right speaker

Left speaker

TX-NR905_En.book Page 30 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup

Bridging Front Speakers B
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
• For bridging, the positive (+) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type Front B setting to BTL to enable
bridging (see page 51).
• When front Speakers B are bridged, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speakers can handle the additional power.

Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.

Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.

HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

CR/PR

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

SURR L

PRE OUT
FRONT L

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT R (BTL)

ZONE2 R

SURR BACK R

SURR BACK L

ZONE2 L

ASSIGNABLE

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

Right speaker

Left speaker

TX-NR905_En.book Page 31 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.

Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.

The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
■ North American Model

Thumbtacks, etc.

AM antenna push terminals

HD RADIO

ANTENNA
FM
75

Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
FM antenna jack

■ Other Models

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead (see page 32).

AM antenna push terminals

ANTENNA
AM

FM75

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.

Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.

Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).

FM antenna jack

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
■ American Model
FM75

Insert the plug fully
into the jack.

■ Other Models

Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
■ North American Model

FM75

Insert the plug fully
into the jack.

Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.

Push

Insert wire

Release

TX-NR905_En.book Page 32 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Antennas—Continued

■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.

■ Other Models

Push

Insert wire

Release

TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver

Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 32).

To TV (or VCR)

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
■ North American Model
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.

■ Other Models
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable

FM 75

Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possible noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.

AM loop antenna

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizontally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 33 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components
AV Connection Color Coding

About AV Connections

RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect rightchannel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.

• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.

Optical Digital Jacks

Left (white)

The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.

Analog audio

Right (red)
(Yellow)

Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.

Left (white)
Right (red)

Composite video

• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.

(Yellow)
Right!

Wrong!

AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable

Jack

Description

HDMI connections can carry uncompressed standard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.

HDMI

Component
video cable

Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)

CB/PB

CR/PR

S-Video cable

S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
and provides better picture quality than composite
video.

Composite
video cable

Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.

Audio
Optical digital
audio cable

OPTICAL

Coaxial digital
audio cable

COAXIAL

FRONT

Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
common connection format for analog audio and
can be found on virtually all AV components.

Analog audio
cable (RCA)

This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.

SURR

SURR BACK

MULTI CH

This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel cable.

Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 34 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video

Video

Audio

TV, projector,
etc.

DVD player, etc.
Speakers (see page 26 for hookup details)

Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.

Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI outputs.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
Immediate Display preference to Off (page 107).
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or
Video Signal Flow Chart
Sub (see page 52), video input signals flow
DVD player, etc.
through the AV receiver as shown, with composite video, S-Video, and component video
sources all being upconverted for the respective HDMI output. Use the Main or Sub setComposite
ting if you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to your TV.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.

Component

HDMI

AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite

TV, projector, etc.

S-Video

Component

HDMI

TX-NR905_En.book Page 35 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 52), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to your TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.

Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.

Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

IN
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor
Out Resolution setting is set to Through (see
page 52).
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No
(see page 52), if the Monitor Out Resolution
setting is set to anything other than Through
(see page 52), the video signal flow will be as
shown here, with composite video and S-Video
sources being upconverted for the component
video output.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input
signals are not output.

TV, projector, etc.

Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.

Composite

S-Video

Component

HDMI

IN
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite

S-Video

Component

TV, projector, etc.

Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals connected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.

Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.

HDMI

Optical

HDMI

Optical

Coaxial

Analog

Multichannel

AV receiver

MD recorder, etc.

Analog

* 1 Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 109).
* 2 Only the front L/R channels are output.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 36 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

Best

MONITOR OUT S

S-Video input

Better

MONITOR OUT V

Composite video input

Standard

GAME/TV IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐

Component video input

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
COAXIAL
OUT

Connect one
or the other

Hint!

OPTICAL
OUT

PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO IN

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
IN

VIDEO
IN

TV, projector,
etc.

If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 39 and 41).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 37 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection a .
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

DVD player

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1

Component video output

Best

DVD IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

DVD IN V

DVD IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

ZONE2 R

SURR BACK R

ASSIGNABLE

Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

IN 2

(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
COAXIAL
OUT

Connect one
or the other

OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

DVD player

To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 38.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 38 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT
L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio output on your
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s
SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 59. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 78. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 109.

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

7.1 ch
5.1 ch

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH

SURR L

IN 2

(CD)

R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

R
FRONT

L
CENTER

SUB
WOOFER

R
SURROUND

DVD player

R
SURR
BACK

TX-NR905_En.book Page 39 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection. If you use
connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a and
b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

VCR or DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2

Component video output

Best

VCR/DVR IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

VCR/DVR IN V

VCR/DVR IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
ANTENNA

COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

Bi-AMP

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR

TX-NR905_En.book Page 40 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A or B ), and then make the connection. The video
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a or b ), and then make the connection.

Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

VCR or DVD recorder

VCR/DVR OUT S

S-Video input

Better

VCR/DVR OUT V

⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒

Composite video input

Standard

VCR/DVR OUT L/R

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

Picture quality

Audio L/R input
Digital optical input

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R

ZONE2 R

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
OPTICAL
IN

R
AUDIO
IN

S VIDEO
IN

VIDEO
IN

VCR or DVR

Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 41 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

Hint!

Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

Video source

Picture quality

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

Best

CBL/SAT IN S

CBL/SAT IN V

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

Component video output

CBL/SAT IN L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

OUT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

ZONE2 R

SURR BACK R

ASSIGNABLE

Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

DVD

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 42 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface),*1 so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will
display a picture.

The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a

Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.

About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),*2 a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 43 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI outputs.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 34 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 109).
Hint!

To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Out setting to On (see page 109), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV receiver’s speakers, set the HDMI
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
receiver's speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.

Note:
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 109), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV
receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
HDMI
OUT

HDMI
IN

TV
DVD player

HDMI

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

TX-NR905_En.book Page 44 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a
and b .)
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

Game console

COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3

Component video output

Best

GAME/TV IN S

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

S-Video output

Better

Composite video output

Standard

GAME/TV IN V

GAME/TV IN L/R

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1

Picture quality

Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

DVD

VCR/DVR

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

CENTER

SURR

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

SURR BACK R

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

Bi-AMP

DVD

SURR R

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L
OPTICAL
OUT

Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

S VIDEO
OUT

Game Console

FRONT

(VCR/DVR)

OUT

VIDEO
OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH

TX-NR905_En.book Page 45 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( A or B ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( a or b ), and then make the connection.

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

DIGITAL

PUSH TO OPEN

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX
DIMMER

TUNING
MEMORY MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR
DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

VIDEO

S VIDEO

ENTER

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

a
L AUDIO R
INPUT

INPUT

VIDEO
INPUT

S VIDEO

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

L AUDIO R
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

Camcorder, etc.

Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO

AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO

⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐

AUX 2 INPUT L/R

AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL

Camcorder
S-Video output
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output

TX-NR905_En.book Page 46 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

COAXIAL
IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

MONITOR
OUT V

DVD

VCR/DVR

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

R
(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1

OPTICAL

(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R

ZONE2 R

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

SUBWOOFER

DVD

SURR R

FRONT R

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

IN 2

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

Connect one or the other

COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

R
AUDIO
OUT

CD player

• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use a and b , or a and c .)
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

CD IN L/R

Analog audio L/R output

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

⇐
⇐
⇐

Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output

Connecting a Turntable
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turntable.

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turntable with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

IN 3

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

L
FRONT R (BTL)

R
PHONO

AUDIO
OUTPUT
L

TX-NR905_En.book Page 47 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( a , b , c , or d ), and then make the connection.

COAXIAL
IN 2

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT

TAPE

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

S
OUT

IN 2

L
IN 3

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R

ZONE2 R

Bi-AMP

ASSIGNABLE

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

FRONT R

SUBWOOFER

DVD

SURR R

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

IN 2

OPTICAL

(CD)

OUT

TAPE

Connect one
or the other

L
COAXIAL
OUT

OPTICAL
OUT

OPTICAL
IN

AUDIO
IN

AUDIO
OUT

Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.

• With connection a , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections a and b , or a and c .
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection d .
Connection

AV receiver

Signal flow

TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT

Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder

⇐
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇒

Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input

Connecting a Power Amplifier
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack.

MAIN

SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

FRONT

ZONE 2
OUT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

CR/PR

IN
IN 2

IN 3

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(VCR/DVR)

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

PRE OUT

SURR L

FRONT L

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker

6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker

FRONT L (BTL)

FRONT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

Power amplifier

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT

SURR

SURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

TX-NR905_En.book Page 48 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV
IN V jack.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)

IN
HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

GAME/TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

IN 3

IN 2

AUX 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

GAME/TV

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

CB/PB

CR/PR

IN 1

GAME/TV CBL/SA

(DVD)

IN 3

IN
IN 2

OUT

(VCR/DVR)

PHONO

IN 1

(CBL/SAT)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

IN 2
(CD)

PHONO
GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SA
OUT

FRONT R

IN 2

FRONT R (BTL)

(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock, connect its video
output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN S jack.
Notes:
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time (see
page 127).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an
cable (see page 49).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 57).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American and
European models only)
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use
with the AV receiver. These components can then be left turned on so
that they turn on and off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or
Standby.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g.,
TOTAL 120 W).
Notes:
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 109), the
AC outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver
is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
• Onkyo components connected via
should be connected
directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV receiver.
• The number of AC OUTLETS, socket type, and total capacity
depends on the country in which you purchased the AV receiver.

(CBL/SAT)

(GAME/TV)

GAME/TV

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

(VCR/DVR)

OPTICAL

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

OPTICAL

L
IN 3

CR/PR
IN

IN 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

CB/PB

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

IN 1

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AC INLET

AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

AC OUTLET

AC OUTLET
50/60Hz
AC 220-240V
SWITCHED
100W 0.45-0.41A MAX.

European model

AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

American model

TX-NR905_En.book Page 49 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Onkyo

Components

Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary

connections (see illustration below).

Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 57).
With

(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:

Auto Power On/Standby

When you start playback on a component connected via
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via
will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change

When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 78), as the Direct Change
function selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control

You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 127). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver
and not the other component.
Notes:
• Use only
cables for
connections.
cables
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two
jacks. You can connect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
for connecting additional
-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all
functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.

IN
L
R
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

(VCR/DVR)

L
IN 3

FRONT

CR/PR
IN

IN 2

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

REMOTE
CONTROL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

ZONE2 R
ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

DVD

e.g., CD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

e.g., DVD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

Connecting the Power Cord
•
•
•
•

Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 50 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Turning On the AV Receiver
• North American model

• Other models

STANDBY/ON
STANDBY indicator

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
STANDBY

VCR/DVR

TV
INPUT

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
STANDBY

DVD

ON
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

READY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2

DVD

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

VCR/DVR

HDMI OUT

CBL/SAT

STEREO

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

THX

ZONE 2

PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

VCR/DVR

HDMI OUT

CBL/SAT

STEREO

THX

TV VOL

MACRO

OFF

LISTENING MODE

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

DVD

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CDR/MD/DOCK

RECEIVER
POWER

SAT
DIMMER

NET/USB

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

Turning On and Standby

Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).

POWER

(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)
ON

The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.

OFF

On the AV receiver, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.
Remote
controller

AV receiver
STANDBY/ON

RECEIVER

On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components connected via
.

To turn the AV receiver off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF
position ( ).

Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 61.
■ Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT?
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 52.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you did, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 56, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 58 respectively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 57.

OUT

TAPE

HDMI

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock

TX-NR905_En.book Page 51 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.

Speaker Settings
4

If you change these 7settings,
you must run the auto8
9
matic speaker setup+10again (see page 61).
TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ENTER

TV VOL

2-1.Speaker Settings

MACRO

ZONE3

Speaker Impedance
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ENTER

2–5

+
-

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

ENTER

REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see pages
27–30.
Notes:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Speaker
Impedance,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Front (Speaker
A),” and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Normal: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers A
normally.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers A
for bi-amped operation.
BTL: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers A
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.
Note:
• Bi-Amp and BTL cannot be selected
if Front (Speaker B) is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL.

TUP

6ohms
Normal
Not use

SLEEP

1, 6

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

2, 3

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Speaker Settings,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.

ENTER

TX-NR905_En.book Page 52 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

6
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Front (Speaker
B),” and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotUse: Select this if you’re not using
Speakers B.
Normal: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers B
normally.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers B
for bi-amped operation.
BTL: Select this if you’ve connected your front Speakers B
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.

HDMI Monitor Setup

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

INPUT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

ZONE2

VCR

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

2, 3

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

P
TO

U
M EN

1, 6

PREV
CH

SLEEP
ME N

2–5

+
VOL

ENTER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

TV VOL

MACRO

DISC
ALBUM

7
PHONO

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

Note:
• Bi-Amp and BTL cannot be selected
if Front (Speaker A) is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL.

CBL/SAT

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output
by the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output by
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT and have the AV
receiver upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to
match the resolution supported by your TV.

1
RECEIVER

TUP

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 53 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

5
ENTER

ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [ENTER].
The Monitor Out menu appears.
1-1.Monitor Out
HDMI Monitor
Resolution

Main
Through

ENTER

4
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
receiver’s [HDMI OUT] button so
that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.

6
SE

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Resolution,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Through:Select this to pass video
through the AV receiver at the
same resolution and with no
conversion.
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically convert video at resolutions not
supported by your TV.
480p: Select this for 480p output
and video conversion as necessary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
720p: Select this for 720p output
and video conversion as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output
and video conversion as necessary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Notes:
• See page 35 for charts showing how the HDMI Monitor and Resolution settings affect the video signal flow
through the AV receiver.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 54 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Using the HDMI OUT Button

HDMI Input Setup

The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,
or Sub by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV
receiver.
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
INPUT

1, 2

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

MASTER VOLUME

TAPE

STANDBY
READY

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

STANDBY/ON

ZONE 2

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE 3

TV VOL

MACRO
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB

DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

DIGITAL

CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

2, 3

RECEIVER

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

2–4

+
CH

1
HDMI OUT

1, 5

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.

ID E

TUP

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

HDMI OUT

Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
No: Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
MONITOR OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the
[HDMI OUT] button to select No.

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that composite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted (*) and output by the HDMI outputs. You
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video

HDMI

IN
(*)
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SLEEP

HDMI

TX-NR905_En.book Page 55 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

Notes:
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one
input selector.
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI
OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to
Main or Sub, respectively (see page 52). See page 34
for more information on video signal flow and upconversion.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 58.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [ENTER].
The HDMI Input menu appears.
1-2.HDMI Input

ENTER

4
ENTER

ENTER

5
SE

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2

-------------

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
outputs.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

TX-NR905_En.book Page 56 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup

1
RECEIVER

SE
ON

STANDBY

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

TV
INPUT

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

CLEAR

+10

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

ENTER

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

ZONE2

VCR

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

NET/USB

CABLE
SAT

2, 3

P
TO

ME N

U
M EN

2–4

+
CH

PREV
CH

SLEEP

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

ENTER

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

ENTER
SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selectors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2) are assigned to the “- - -” option.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted (*) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT. You can set this for each input selector by selecting
the “- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video

4
ENTER

ENTER

(* )
OUT
Composite video, S-Video

Component video

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Component Video Input menu
appears.
1-3.Component Video Input

ENTER

Component video

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2

IN1
-----------

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3.
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 57 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

TUP

Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to No (see page 52). See
page 34 for more information on video signal flow and
upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Changing the Input Display
If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.

1, 2

1, 2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

1
TAPE

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.

GAME/TV

2
TAPE

GAME/TV

Press and hold down the [TAPE]
or [GAME/TV] input selector button (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the TAPE input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
TAPE → MD → CDR

→

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

DOCK

→

For the GAME/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Note:
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same
time.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 58 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Digital Input Setup

2
ENTER

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

ENTER

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

ZONE2

VCR

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

2, 3

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

1, 5

PREV
CH

ENTER

2–4

1-4.Digital Input

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SLEEP

DIMMER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Digital
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
The Digital Input menu appears.

ID E

E XI

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

ENTER

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO

COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
--FRONT
----OPT2
---

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.

4
ENTER

These are the default assignments.
Input selector

Audio input

DVD

COAX1

VCR/DVR

COAX2

CBL/SAT

COAX3

GAME/TV

OPT1

AUX 1

---

AUX 2

FRONT (Fixed)

ENTER

TAPE

---

TUNER

---

OPT2

PHONO

---

1
RECEIVER

TUP

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 3.
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 2.
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
input.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 59 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

5
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

DIGITAL INPUT

Notes:
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input
selector.
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 54, this input assignment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] button repeatedly to select an
option.
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 58.

Analog Input Setup

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK

Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.

NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

2, 3

RECEIVER

ME N

2–4

+
CH

1, 5

MASTER VOLUME

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SLEEP

ENU
PM

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

REC
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

SP A
RETURN

SETUP

SP B

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

LISTENING MODE

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

2, 3

1
DVD

Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
VCR/DVR

RECEIVER
GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

SURR
AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.

CBL/SAT

STEREO
REPEAT

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]
button.
The current assignment is displayed.

DIGITAL INPUT

TX-NR905_En.book Page 60 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Analog
Input,” and then press [ENTER].
The Analog Input menu appears.
1-5.Analog Input
Multich

DVD

ENTER

4
ENTER

5
SE

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multichannel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly to select Multich (see page 78).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Picture Quality Menu
The new “1–6. Picture Quality” item has been added to
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The
settings are explained below.
■ Picture Mode
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver automatically detects the type of content and processes it accordingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film
manually.
Auto: The type of content is detected automatically and processed accordingly (default).
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from video.
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from film.
■ Edge Enhancement
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture
appear sharper.
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).
Low: Low edge enhancement.
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.
High: High edge enhancement.
■ Mosquito NR
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue
with overly compressed MPEG content.
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High: High mosquito noise reduction.
■ Random NR
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indiscriminate picture noise, such as film grain.
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low random noise reduction.
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.
High: High random noise reduction.
■ Block NR
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG
content.
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 61 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT

Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers connected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.

Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
TV

Notes:
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
Speaker Impedance setting before running the
automatic speaker setup (see page 51).
• Automatic speaker setup can only be used with
Speakers A.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected, or Speakers B is selected.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the automatic speaker setup for three positions. Total measurement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 2

AUX 1

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

2, 9

SETUP MIC
ON

STANDBY

TV
INPUT

DVD

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

VCR/DVR

1
GAME/TV

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ENTER

RECEIVER
SLEEP

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

: Listening area
: Listening position

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

REC

VOL

T
E XI

MUTING

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

TX-NR905_En.book Page 62 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.

The speaker detect results
appear.
ENTER

Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.

2
SETUP MIC

Next
Retry
Cancel

:Yes
ENTER

Place the setup microphone at
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the SETUP MIC
jack.

If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select Next, and then
press [ENTER].
The options are:

Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.

Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.

The following screen appears.
Auto Speaker Setup
Next

Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.

ENTER

:No

SP Detect Result

“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.

Auto Speaker Setup

Notes:
• Make sure the microphone is horizontal.
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work correctly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results. You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.

Auto Speaker Setup

Press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup
ENTER

Do not unplug
microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...

Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 61),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
Auto Speaker Setup
Do not unplug
microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...

A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT determines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
Note:
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.

When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 63 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

After the 3rd or 7th measurement, the
following screen appears.
ENTER

Review SP Distance: Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 65).
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
level settings (see “Reviewing
the Results” on page 65).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.

Auto Speaker Setup
Next
finish(Calculate)

ENTER

Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Next: Select this if you want to measure another listening position. After the 8th
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish (Calculate): Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.

If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup

Saving...

Disconnect the setup microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup

When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.

Please unplug microphone.

Auto Speaker Setup

Calculating...

When the calculations are complete, the following screen
appears.

Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 101) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.

ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER

Error Messages
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
❑ Ambient noise is too high
Auto Speaker Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER].
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speaker configuration settings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 65).

Retry
Cancel

Ambient noise is too high.

This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed properly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 64 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
❑ Speaker Detect Error
Auto Speaker Setup

Retry
Cancel

Retry
Cancel
:Yes
:---

Auto Speaker Setup

:No
:Error

Speaker Detect Error

This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup

A different number of speakers has been detected.
❑ Writing Error
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel

Retry
Cancel
:Yes

:No

:---

:Error

Speaker Detect Error

The front right speaker has not been detected.
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
:Yes
:---

:No
:Error

Speaker Detect Error

The surround right speaker has not been detected.
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
:Yes
:---

:No
:Error

Speaker Detect Error

The surround back left speaker has not been detected.
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
:Yes
:---

:No
:Error

Speaker Detect Error

There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.

Writing Error!

This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may
be malfunctioning and you should contact your Onkyo
dealer.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 65 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually

Reviewing the Results

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup

ENTER

AUDYSSEY

Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel

The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch

:
:
:
:
:
:

Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch

Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 94–101).
Notes:
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) crossover frequency is recommended. If you use the automatic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 94).
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recommends setting the subwoofer level and distance manually.

Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try running the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft

Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Auto Speaker Setup

AUDYSSEY

Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB

Press [RETURN] to return to the previous screen.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 66 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”
and then press [ENTER].
The OSD Setup menu appears.
6-2.OSD Setup

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

ENTER

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

2, 3

ME N

ENTER

2–4

PREV
CH

SLEEP

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ENU
PM

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

ENTER

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

On
4:3
Bottom
Auto

7
PHONO

Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
Language

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “TV Format,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.

1
RECEIVER

TUP

2
ENTER

ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. Miscellaneous,” and then press [ENTER].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.

5
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 67 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

First Time Setup—Continued
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [ENTER].
The Tuner menu appears.
7-3.Tuner

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

AM Freq Step

9kHz

INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

ENTER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

2, 3

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

ENTER

2–4

PREV
CH

SLEEP

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

1, 5

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

ENTER

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “AM Freq.
Step,” and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX

ALL ST

For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

5
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

ENTER

TX-NR905_En.book Page 68 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Playing Your AV Components
Basic AV Receiver Operation
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

TV
INPUT

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

GAME/TV

1
MASTER VOLUME

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

TV VOL

MACRO

STANDBY

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

READY
ZONE 2

DVD

VCR

ZONE2

ZONE 3

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

CABLE

DISPLAY

NET/USB

SAT

PUSH TO OPEN

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

ENU

MEN

+
CH

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

1
AV receiver

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DVD

VCR/DVR

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

8
NET/USB

+10

Remote
controller

SP A

SP B

AV receiver

Remote
controller

MASTER VOLUME

VOL

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

To switch between Speakers A and Speakers B, use the remote controller’s [SP A] and
[SP B] buttons.

A and B indicators

Start playback on the source component.
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s connected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI
OUT SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.

AUDIO

CBL/SAT

1
GAME/TV

PHONO

REPEAT

To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.

RECEIVER
VCR/DVR

SURR

Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.

Remote
controller

DVD

STEREO

To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote
controller’s [VOL] button.
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
+18.0 dB.

Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 79.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 69 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode

Listening to AM/FM Stations

TUNING MODE
TUNING

TUNING
MODE

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the display.

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX 1

TAPE

AUX 2

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

TUNING

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

VIDEO

S VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

TUNING

Press and hold the TUNING Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.

TUNER

With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.

TUNER

Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Band

Frequency

The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

(Actual display depends on country.)

Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode

TUNING
MODE

2
TUNING

Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.

Press the TUNING Up or Down
[ ]/[ ] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.

TUNING

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO
indicator will not appear on models that have HD Radio.)
TUNED
AUTO

FM STEREO

TX-NR905_En.book Page 70 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering the appropriate frequency.

Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
DISPLAY
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

READY

STANDBY

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

INPUT

Number
buttons

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

PURE AUDIO

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

AUDIO SEL

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

D.TUN

Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.

ZONE3

ZONE2

CBL/SAT

TV VOL

REMOTE MODE
VCR

VCR/DVR

PUSH TO OPEN

MACRO

DVD

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER

U
M EN

ME N

Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.

RECEIVER

Band

Frequency

Preset #

Listening mode

D. TUN

CLEAR

(Actual display depends on country.)

DISPLAY

SLEEP

P
TO

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

+10

Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
Note:
• While the [RECEIVER] button is
flashing, you cannot select another
input source with the remote controller.

Note:
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 104), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 71 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
RDS Program Types (PTY)

Using RDS
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indicator appears.
RDS indicator

■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. RDS is approved by the
National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) and is
available in North America.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can also help you find
radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:

Type

Display

None

NONE

News reports

NEWS

Current affairs

AFFAIRS

Information

INFO

Sport

SPORT

Education

EDUCATE

Drama

DRAMA

Culture

CULTURE

Science and technology

SCIENCE

Varied

VARIED

Pop music

POP M

Rock music

ROCK M

Middle of the road music

EASY M

Light classics

LIGHT M

Serious classics

CLASSICS

Other music

OTHER M

Weather

WEATHER

Finance

FINANCE

Children’s programmes

CHILDREN

PS (Program Service)

Social affairs

SOCIAL

When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for
3 seconds.

Religion

RELIGION

Phone in

PHONE IN

RT (Radio Text)

When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 72).
PTY (Program Type)

Travel

TRAVEL

Leisure

LEISURE

Jazz music

JAZZ

Country music

COUNTRY

National music

NATION M

Oldies music

OLDIES

This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 72).

Folk music

FOLK M

Documentary

DOCUMENT

TP (Traffic Program)

Alarm test

TEST

This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 72).
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.

Alarm

ALARM

TX-NR905_En.book Page 72 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying Radio Text (RT)

To start the search, press
[ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before continuing with the search.

RT/PTY/TP
ENTER

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [ENTER].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.

DIGITAL

ENTER

When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
The RT information scrolls across the
display.

RT/PTY/TP

Listening to Traffic News (TP)

1
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

3
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.

3 1

4, 5
MASTER VOLUME

Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY

TUNER

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

2
RT/PTY/TP

You can search for radio stations by type.

Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broadcast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.

TUNER

2
RT/PTY/TP

3
PRESET

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
Use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
See the table on page 71.

3
ENTER

To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 73 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Presets

Presetting AM/FM Stations

PRESET

2, 4

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV
MASTER VOLUME

INPUT
STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

STANDBY
READY

CBL/SAT

ZONE 2
STANDBY/ON
ZONE 3

STANDBY
READY

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

ZONE 3
ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

THX

AUX 1

ZONE 2

NET/USB

PHONO

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

+10
PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY
ON

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE

RETURN

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

NET/USB

DISPLAY

AUX 2 INPUT

CLEAR
12

S VIDEO

ENTER

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

MACRO

CLEAR

OFF

PHONO

SETUP MIC

USB

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

TV VOL

PRESET

TUNING

ZONE 2
PHONES

PUSH TO OPEN

D. TUN

TUNING

SETUP

CLEAR

OFF

PUSH TO OPEN

TAPE

AUX 2

ZONE3

DIGITAL

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

RECEIVER

SAT

You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM and FM radio stations.

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

DIMMER

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

CH +/–

Tune into the AM or FM station
you want to store as a preset.

PREV
CH

2
MEMORY

PRESET

MEMORY

Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.

While the preset number is flashing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select a preset from 1 through 40.

Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite stations.

ID E

TUP

XI T

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

To select a preset, use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] button.

PRESET

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

Deleting Presets

2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identification (see page 104).

READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.

2
MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

CLEAR

While holding down the [MEMORY] button, press the
[TUNING MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 74 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only)
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conventional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
www.hdradio.com

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

RECEIVER

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

ENTER

ME N

ENU
PM

+
CH

PREV
CH

DISPLAY

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

About HD Radio Stations

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 69). You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 73).
If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio technology, the HD indicator lights up.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

AUDIO SEL

RC-687M

AUDIO SEL
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2

Station name

HD indicator

PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

ENTER
Song title

Artist name

HD Radio channel number

• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist name
information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

DISPLAY

TX-NR905_En.book Page 75 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Multicast Channels
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are called multicast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program services) indicator lights up.

1
ENTER

Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.

Note:
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital signal, so to select an audio format, you must select multicast channel #1 first.

Displaying HD Radio Information
Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
Frequency

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down Arrow
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a multicast channel.
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.

Reserved channel indication

Station information

Artist information

Song title information

HD Radio channel number

Within 5 seconds, press [ENTER] to set
the multicast channel.
Note:
• Multicast channels are not available
on AM.

Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital versions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Remote
controller

Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select Auto or Analog.

AUDIO SEL

AV receiver

AUDIO SEL

Auto: Select to use the digital signal.
Analog: Select to use the analog signal.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 76 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
AUX1

GAME/TV

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

Press
[RECEIVER]
first

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

PM
TO

ME N

ENU

SLEEP

LEVEL

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

LEVEL

Use the remote controller’s
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).

MUTING

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

CH SEL

RECEIVER

DIMMER

DISPLAY

Adjusting Speaker Levels

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

LEVEL – +

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 94).
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.

STANDBY

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

PHONES

DIMMER

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR
ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

PHONES

DIMMER

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.

DISPLAY

Muting the AV Receiver
Setting the Display Brightness

You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.

You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Remote
controller
DIMMER

AV receiver
DIMMER

Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[DIMMER] button (not European models).

MUTING

Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.

To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The
output is unmuted and the MUTING indicator goes off.
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Tip:
• You can specify how much the output is muted with
the Muting Level setting (see page 106).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 77 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer

Displaying Source Information

With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that
it turns off automatically after a specified period.
SLEEP

Press the remote controller’s
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then the previous display reappears.
SLEEP indicator

You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller

DISPLAY

Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.

AV receiver

DISPLAY

The following information can typically be displayed:
Input source
Listening
mode

To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP]
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.

Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
PHONES jack.

Signal format*
Sampling
frequency

*If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is
displayed. For some digital input signals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,
and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

POWER

OFF

ZONE 3

Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays
the same.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 78 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs

Specifying the Digital Signal Format

1
REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

MASTER VOLUME

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STANDBY/ON

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

STANDBY

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

READY

THX

ALL ST

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

VCR

DVD

HDD

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

RC-687M

If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.

AUDIO SEL

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select an audio
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
HDMI: Selects the assigned HDMI
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 54.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAXIAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
IN, and the DIGITAL indicator appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 58.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
Multich: Selects the multichannel
input, and the ANALOG indicator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 59.)
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.

Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewinding a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.

Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select Auto.

AUDIO SEL

While “Auto” is shown on the display, use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Auto (default): The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 79 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes
Selecting with the Remote Controller

Selecting the Listening Modes

For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 84.

• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).

PREV
CH

Selecting on the AV Receiver
STEREO

ID E

VOL

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.

ME N

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Information” on page 77.

ENU

SURR

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

STEREO
PURE A
DIRECT

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

ALL ST
THX

RC-687M

■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.

THX
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

■ [SURR] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes.

READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

PURE AUDIO

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

LISTENING MODE

■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals. Pressing this button again will select
the previous listening mode.
■ [STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.

■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.
■ [PURE A] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display is turned off and only the HDMI outputs output
video signals.
■ [DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ [ALL ST] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.

■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 80 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Source format

32–96
kHz
Media

Button

Listening Mode

[PURE A] Pure Audio
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo

Multi
channel
176.4/
192kHz*1 analog

CD, TV, radio,

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel PCM
except */2

DVD

✔
✔

176.4/192 kHz*1
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch

32–96 kHz
*/2
DVD

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

Multichannel

✔
✔
✔
✔

DVD

✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔

Dolby D

[SURR]

Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2

✔

✔
✔
✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1

[THX]

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Cinema*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx
THX*3

✔*2

✔

Neo:6 THX*3

✔*3

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode

✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
Mono
Onkyo
Original DSP

LISTENING MODE*4
[ ]/[ ]

THX Games Mode

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

Mono Movie
Orchestra
*3
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

TX-NR905_En.book Page 81 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Multichannel

Source format

3/2
Media
Button

Listening Mode

[PURE A]

Pure Audio

[DIRECT]

Direct

[STEREO] Stereo

2ch

Dolby D
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2

SACD

2ch

Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel
1/0, 1+1 except
*/2
*/2

DVD, DTV, etc.

2ch

1/0, 1+1

Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔

✔*2
✔

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔*3

✔*3

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD

[SURR]

DSD

✔

Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*4
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*4

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔
✔

Neo:6

✔

Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*5
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
Mono
Onkyo
Original DSP

LISTENING MODE
[ ]/[ ]

THX Games Mode
Mono Movie
Orchestra
5
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
[THX]

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct and Pure Audio, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 91), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 82 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2

Source format

Media
Button
[PURE A]

Pure Audio
Direct

[STEREO]

Stereo

2ch

1/0, 1+1

except
*/2

*/2

Blu-ray, HD DVD

Listening Mode

[DIRECT]

DTS, DTS96/24

✔
✔
✔

1/0

DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel

✔
✔
✔

2ch

DVD, CD, etc.

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24

✔*2

DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio

✔

TrueHD

[SURR]

DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3

✔
✔

✔

Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔
✔

✔

Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX

✔

Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

✔

THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Onkyo
Original DSP

Mono
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz/2-channel audio signal, regardless its number of channels.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Surround EX

LISTENING MODE*5
[ ]/[ ]

✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Ultra2 Cinema

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.

✔
✔

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
[THX]

✔

TX-NR905_En.book Page 83 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD High Resolution
Source format

Multichannel
except */2
*/2
Media

Button

[PURE A] Pure Audio
[STEREO] Stereo

1/0

Blu-ray, HD DVD

Listening Mode

[DIRECT] Direct

2ch

DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
2ch
except */2
*/2

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

1/0

Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔
✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔

Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
DSD
[SURR]

Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2

✔*3

✔

✔*3

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔*3

Neo:6

✔

✔*3

✔

Neo:6 Music

✔*3
✔
✔

✔
✔

✔

THX Cinema*2
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
Neo:6 THX

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔

✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono

✔
✔

✔

THX Ultra2 Cinema

Onkyo
Original DSP

✔

Neo:6 THX Games Mode

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D

✔

Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
THX Surround EX

LISTENING MODE
[ ]/[ ]

✔

Neo:6 Cinema

Neural THX 7.1

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

✔

Neural THX 5.1

[THX]

✔

✔*3

✔
✔
✔
✔

✔*3

✔

192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 84 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
About the Listening Modes
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.

Dolby Digital

Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.

Pure Audio

Dolby EX

In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry
is turned off, only the HDMI outputs output video.)

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.

Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Direct

In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidelity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo

Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono

Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Multichannel

This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.

Dolby Digital Plus

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
Dolby TrueHD

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
DTS NEO:6

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• NEO:6 Cinema

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music

Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game

Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.

Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• NEO:6 Music

Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
DTS

The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for highfidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24

This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 85 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-ES Discrete

THX

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete soundtrack.

Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the director intended.

DTS-ES Matrix

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTSES logo.
DTS-HD High Resolution

Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
DTS-HD Master Audio

Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete channels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.

Neural THX 5.1/7.1

Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-channel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, including video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surroundsound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Surround on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.

• THX Cinema

This mode is for watching movies, which are typically recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other formats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1channel playback. It does this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel output.
• THX Music Mode

This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode

This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
• THX Surround EX

This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

DSD

DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multichannel audio.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 86 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie

This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra

Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged

Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix

Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic

This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo

Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono

In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)

With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 87 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital outputs, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video signals, so select another mode when recording.

Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two separate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player connected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder connected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
PUSH TO OPEN

AUX 2 INPUT

S VIDEO

L AUDIO R

VIDEO

DIGITAL

Camcorder
video signal
audio signal

Recording the Input Source
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

RS232

Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 33 to 49
for hookup information.

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

IN 2

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

CR/PR

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

IN
IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

IN 3

(CBL/SAT)

OUT

FRONT

OUT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1
(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH

SURR L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

1
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

Remote
controller
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

AUX2

GAME/TV

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

+10

2
3

FRONT R (BTL)

Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 34 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
You can watch the source while recording it. The AV receiver’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
recording.

On your recorder, start recording.
On the source component, start
playback.

CD player

VCR

Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.

Prepare the VCR for recording.

Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.

Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.

Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.

Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 88 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.

Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup

The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.

Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu

Submenu

☞ pages 52–59

Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup

1.Input/Output Assign
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input

☞ pages 94–102
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

☞ page 106
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup

☞ page 90
3.Audio Adjust

page 66

☞ page 108
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
6.Network

1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level

☞ pages 103–104
4.Source Setup

page 67

☞ page 110
8.Lock Setup
Lock

Unlocked

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

☞ page 92
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB

page 51

TX-NR905_En.book Page 89 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes
Using the Late Night Function
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.

TV
INPUT

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

RECEIVER

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

RECEIVER

SLEEP

DIMMER

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

L NIGHT

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

Re-EQ
L NIGHT

Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTSES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multichannel.

RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic
range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
Auto: The dynamic range is controlled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
(default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.

Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to Auto.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.

Re-EQ

TX-NR905_En.book Page 90 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.

RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Audio
Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].
The Audio Adjust menu appears.

Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individually. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver

3.Audio Adjust

ENTER

1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level

2
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 1

AUX 2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

SETUP

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

ZONE 3

DIGITAL INPUT

LISTENING MODE
TUNING

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

ENTER

4
ENTER

2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.

ENTER

5
SE

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TONE

ENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Surround, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
Use the Up [ ] and Down [
buttons to adjust.

]

Notes:
• The tone can be adjusted for Speakers A or Speakers
B. The same values are used for both.
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when
the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX listening modes.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 91 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Direct Setting
Delay Enable

■ DSD
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.

Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex

■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
Mono

■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
(default).

PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)

These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
■ Panorama
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■ Center Width
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Neo:6 Music

■ Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenuated, maintaining the original stereo balance.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 92 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.

Dolby Digital Settings
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are handled.
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).

T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
■ Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
Front left speaker

■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)

Listening Mode Presets
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats supported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then
select the listening mode automatically depending on the
format of the input signal. You can still select the other
listening modes, although the default listening mode will
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

ENU
PM

SETUP

ME N

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

Front right speaker

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

30˚

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ENTER

RECEIVER

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

Narrow: Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.

RECEIVER

LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
■ Dolby D
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
■ DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
5.Listening Mode Preset

ENTER

1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB

TX-NR905_En.book Page 93 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

3
ENTER

192/176.4k: Specifies the default listening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then press [ENTER].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.

Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).

5-x.Listening Mode Preset

ENTER

Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono

Last
Last
Last
Last
Last

Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid

DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD

Last
Last
Last
Last
Last

Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid

DSD Multi: Specifies the default listening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.

5
SE

TUP

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.

4
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an audio format, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a listening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 80).

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Analog/PCM: Specifies the default listening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listening mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 94 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup
Speaker Setup

This section explains items on the Speaker Setup menu.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.

RECEIVER

Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

SP A

ZONE2

SP B

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

CABLE

NET/USB

SAT

ENU
PM

ME N

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ENTER

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.

ID E

TUP

E XI

2
SE

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
TUP

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE

Speaker Settings

ENTER

See “Speaker Settings” on page 51.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

Speaker Configuration

ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency,
distance, and level for each speaker.
You can choose which of the speakers you want to use
with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations, and
set the crossover frequencies, distances, and levels of the
front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back) use the same crossover frequencies,
distances, and levels for Speakers A and Speakers B.
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz, 150 Hz, or
200 Hz.
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover frequency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to determine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.

4
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Config screen appears.
2-2.Speaker Config

ENTER

Speakers A
Subwoofer
Yes
Front
Full Band
Center
100Hz
Surround
100Hz
Surr Back
100Hz
Surr Back Ch
2ch
LPF of LFE
120Hz
Double Bass
On

TX-NR905_En.book Page 95 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

ENTER

6
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is connected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is connected.

8
ENTER

Note:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
Notes:
• This setting can be set independently
for front Speakers A and front Speakers B.
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 5) is set to No.

ENTER

9
ENTER

ENTER

7
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51).
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 6) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
• For Speakers B, if any channel is set
to Full Band, Center is fixed at Full
Band.

10
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surround,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51).
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 6) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are connected, select None.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), Surround is set to None
(step 8), or Powered Zone 2 is being
used (page 121).
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 8) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), SurrBack is set to None
(step 9), or Powered Zone 2 is being
used (page 121).
Continue with step 11 on the next page.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 96 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel

Double Bass

This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).

With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.

With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.

*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).

11
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lowpass filter frequency.
The following low-pass filter frequencies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.
Note:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Continue with step 12 in the next column.

This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).

12
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off (THX): The subwoofer only outputs the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer outputs front left and right channel bass sounds.
Note:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Continue with step 13 on the next page.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 97 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Setting Speakers A and Speakers B

These settings are not set automatically by the Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).

ENTER

If you’re using Speakers B, you can choose whether or
not to use the subwoofer, center, surround, and surround
back speakers with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations independently. You cannot choose whether or
not to use the front speakers.

ENTER

Use the remote controller’s [SP A] or [SP B] button to
select Speakers A or Speakers B, respectively.

Note:
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Center (step 7) is set to None.

Press the Down [ ] button to
display the bottom half of the
Speaker Config screen.
ENTER

2-2.Speaker Config
Speakers A
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back

Not Use
Use
Not Use
Use
Use

Notes:
• The bottom half of the Speaker Config screen can only be displayed
when the Speakers Type Front B setting is set to something other than
Not Use (page 51).
• You can switch between the Speakers A and Speakers B settings on
either half of the Speaker Config
screen.

14
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the subwoofer with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the subwoofer with Speakers
A or Speakers B.
Note:
• Cannot be set if Subwoofer (step 5) is
set to No.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surround,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround speakers
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surround speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Note:
• Cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Surround (step 8) is set to None.

17
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “SurrBack,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround back speakers with Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surround back speakers
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Note:
• Fixed at Not Use if Surround (step
16) is set to Not Use.
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type Front
B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 51),
SurrBack is set to None (step 9), or
Powered Zone 2 is being used
(page 121).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 98 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

18
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Speaker Distance
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position. You
can set the distances for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the
same distance settings for Speakers A and Speakers B.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.

RECEIVER

SP A

SP B

TUP

3
ENTER

Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

4
ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Speaker Distance,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
2-3.Speaker Distance

ENTER

Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft

Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 94) cannot be selected.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 99 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

ENTER

6
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Unit,” and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot
steps.
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.15 to 9 meters in
0.15-meter steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Notes:
• You can specify different distances
for front Speakers A and front Speakers B, but not the other speakers (i.e.,
subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back).
• The Center distance cannot be set if
the currently selected speakers
(Speakers A or Speakers B) is set to
BTL (page 51), or Center is set to
None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97).
• The Surr Right and Surr Left distances cannot be set if the currently
selected speakers (Speakers A or
Speakers B) is set to BTL (page 51),
or Surround is set to None (page 94)
or Not Use (page 97).
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
distances cannot be set if Speaker
Type Front A or Front B is set to BiAmp or BTL (page 51), Surr Back is
set to None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97), or Powered Zone 2 is
being used (page 121).
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No
(page 95).

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Speaker Level Calibration
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listening position. You can adjust the levels of front Speakers
A and front Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back)
use the same level settings for Speakers A and Speakers
B.
Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.

1
RECEIVER

SP A

SP B

Repeat step 6 for each speaker.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

TUP

3
ENTER

Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
Speaker Type Front B is set to Not
Use.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively.

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

TUP

TX-NR905_En.book Page 100 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

4
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Level Calibration,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB

Note:
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 94).

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
Notes:
• You can set different levels for front
Speakers A and front Speakers B, but
not the other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back).
• The Center level cannot be set if the
currently selected speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B) is set to BTL
(page 51), or Center is set to None
(page 94) or Not Use (page 97).
• The Surr Right and Surr Left levels
cannot be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to BTL (page 51), or Surround
is set to None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97).
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
levels cannot be set if Speaker Type
Front A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp
or BTL (page 51), Surr Back is set to
None (page 94) or Not Use
(page 97), or Powered Zone 2 is
being used (page 121).
• The Subwoofer levels cannot be set if
Subwoofer is set to No (page 95).

100

Repeat step 5 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

2-4.Level Calibration
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer

TUP

Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedicated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 101 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 61).

ENTER

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume of each speaker can be set on page 99. The Equalizer settings only apply to Speakers A and cannot be
adjusted while Speakers B is selected.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

5
SE

TUP
ENTER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.

Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual: The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey:The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
Setup function.
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Surround, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.

ENTER

2.Speaker Setup

ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

6
ENTER

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press
[ENTER].
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
2-5.Equalizer Settings

ENTER

Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz

Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
You can select: 63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz,
1000 Hz, 2500 Hz, 6300 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.

101

TX-NR905_En.book Page 102 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

7
ENTER

Use the Up [ ] button to select
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup

ENTER
ENTER

3
8

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

ENTER

1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.

TUP
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC

1ft-4ft
Yes
Off

ENTER

Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.

4
ENTER

THX Audio Setup
These settings are not set automatically by the Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 61).
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers. This
setting is used by Speakers A and Speakers B.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).

1
RECEIVER

102

TUP

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your surround back speakers:
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your surround back speakers are more than 4
feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
• Cannot be set if Surr Back Ch is set
to 2ch (page 95), Speaker Type Front
A or Front B is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 51), SurrBack is set to None
(page 95) or Not Use (page 97), or
Powered Zone 2 is being used
(page 121).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 103 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “THX Subwoofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
Yes: Select this if you have a THXcertified subwoofer.

Source Setup
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
input selector buttons to select
an input source.

RECEIVER

ENTER
DVD

6
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.

VCR/DVR

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

+10

2
SE

Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).

Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
TUP

3
7

Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
SE

CBL/SAT

1
GAME/TV

ENTER

TUP

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
4.Source Setup

ENTER

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

4
ENTER

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

ENTER

103

TX-NR905_En.book Page 104 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.

ENTER

If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 109), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.

ENTER

Name Edit

6
SE

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.

Select the input selector to which
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the
[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.

IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Use the Left and Right [

]/[

RECEIVER

] buttons to set the level.

If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

A/V Sync

TUP

3
ENTER

When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the delay.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[ENTER].
4-2.A/V Sync
DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync

100msec
60msec)

Press Enter to see picture

104

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup

ENTER

DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

TX-NR905_En.book Page 105 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

4
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Name Edit screen appears.

7
ENTER

4-3.Name Edit
DVD
Display
Name

Default
[

ENTER

]

ENTER

If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.

5
ENTER

8
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Display,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is displayed.
Custom: The custom name is displayed.

Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a character, and
then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the incorrect character, and then press [ENTER]. The
character input screen opens.
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the correct character, and then press [ENTER].
When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[ENTER].
4-3.Name Edit
Name

A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q

ENTER

4-3.Name Edit
Name

ENTER

A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q

[

]

E F G H I J K L M

R S T
e f g
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
( ) + * = / ,

U V W X Y Z
h i j k o m
u v w x y z
7 8 9 - . ‘
: ; ! ? _

Cancel

U V W X Y Z
h i j k o m
u v w x y z
7 8 9 - . ‘
: ; ! ? _
OK

When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.
Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[ENTER] to open the character
input screen.

]

E F G H I J K L M

R S T
e f g
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
( ) + * = / ,

ENTER

[

ENTER

Cancel

“OK”

9
SE

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TUP

Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Satellite Radio
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 109). See the
separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.

SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 109). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for
more information.

105

TX-NR905_En.book Page 106 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup

This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
ENTER
+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

MACRO

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ENTER
P
TO

ENTER

U
M EN

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

ME N

ID E

TUP

T
E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

SP A

1
RECEIVER

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

ENTER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

3
ENTER

ENTER

106

TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Volume Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [ENTER].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous

ENTER

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

SP B

TUP

1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 76). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 107 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your headphones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.

OSD Setup
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
details are displayed.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
■ TV Format
See “TV Format Setup (not North American models)” on
page 66.
■ Language
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.

■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.

107

TX-NR905_En.book Page 108 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.

This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
ENTER

Remote
indicator
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

Number
buttons

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

CLEAR

+10

INPUT

5
SE

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

TUP

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

P
TO

ENTER

U
M EN

ME N

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

ID E

TUP

RN
RE T U
MUTING

REC

RECEIVER

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Remote Control

T
E XI

DISPLAY

RECEIVER

SP B

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

■ Remote ID
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
Note:
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with
the remote controller.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID

TUP

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the TV [INPUT] button.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.

RECEIVER

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
7.Hardware Setup

ENTER

3
ENTER

1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
6.Network

2
DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.

Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 119.

108

TX-NR905_En.book Page 109 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
Tuner
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on
page 67.
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio
Guide for more information.

Analog Multich
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.

HDMI
■ HDMI Audio
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Normally, it should be set to Off.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.

■ Lip Sync
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 104).
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV receiver.
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
Notes:
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompatible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
Power Control

To link the power functions of CEC-compatible components or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.

109

TX-NR905_En.book Page 110 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compatible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready
mode when set to Standby, and the READY indicator
lights up instead of the STANDBY indicator (not
North American model). Also, the AV receiver’s AC
outlets will be on all of the time regardless of whether
the AV receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode
in this case.
TV Control

Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHDcompatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your components off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.

Network
See “Network Settings” on page 117.

Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by locking the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.

110

TX-NR905_En.book Page 111 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB
About NET/USB
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ethernet cable and enjoy the music files stored on your computer or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
NET/USB can also be used to play music files stored on
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV
receiver’s front panel USB port.

Internet Radio
With Internet radio you can:
• Listen to stations that use MP3 or WMA streaming.
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver
from your computer and select stations in your Web
browser.
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.

Supported Audio File Formats
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:
MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A (MPEG-4 Audio). It also
supports Microsoft’s PlaysForSure technology.
■ MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz
and a bit-rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
■ WMA
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
Windows Media® Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
played.
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.

■ WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
■ M4A
M4A stands for MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 16 and 320 kbps, are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename
extension.

USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music
files in the first partition can be played.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital outputs when playing music files.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.

Server Requirements
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• UPnP AV-compatible media server
• DLNA-compatible media server
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Connect
2.0 can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web
site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital outputs when playing music files.

111

TX-NR905_En.book Page 112 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)

Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update
Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP
Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
Memory:
64 MB
Hard disk:
200 MB of free space
Drive:
CD or DVD drive
Modem:
28.8 kbps
Sound card:
16-bit sound card
Monitor:
Super VGA (800 x 600)
Video card:
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Software:
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1

Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.

Notes:
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 117.
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV receiver (see page 117).

Connecting the AV Receiver
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into
a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
TX-NR905
HDMI

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE

IN 4

RS232

IN 3

IN 2

OUT
MAIN

IN 1

OUT
SUB

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3

ETHERNET

ASSIGNABLE

FM75

IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

IN 2

OUT

■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supplying IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows several networked computers to access the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recommended.
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

AUX 1
REMOTE
CONTROL

DIGITAL

CB/PB

GAME/TV CBL/SAT

VCR/DVR

DVD

MONITOR
OUT V

FRONT

12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2

COAXIAL
(DVD)

IN 2

(VCR/DVR)

CR/PR

IN 3

OUT

CENTER

SURR

112

SURR BACK

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK ZONE 2

ZONE 3

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL

PHONO

IN 1

Internet
radio

(GAME/TV)

GND

CD
ZONE2 R

ASSIGNABLE

TAPE

AUX 1

SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP

GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R

VCR/DVR
SURR R

DVD

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH

CENTER

SURR L

PRE OUT
FRONT L

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

ETHERNET
FRONT R (BTL)

FRONT L (BTL)

Modem

WAN port

Router

LAN port
LAN port

■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

ZONE 2
OUT

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

LAN/Ethernet port

Computer or media server

PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP

ZONE2 L
ASSIGNABLE

TX-NR905_En.book Page 113 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a Server
This section explains how to play music files on a computer or media server through the AV receiver. See
page 111 for details on supported music servers and
music file formats.

Start your computer or media
server.

Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button to select the
Server screen.

NET/USB

0
Server

1/2

Server1: Shared1
server: MYPC

The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the server. It flashes if a
connection cannot be established.

3
NET/USB

4
ENTER

Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a server, and
then press [ENTER].
A list of items on the server appears.
Server1: Shared1

ENTER

5
ENTER

1/10

Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
Genre
Year
Rating

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
A list of music files appears.
All Music

ENTER

Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite
My favorite
My favorite
My favorite
My favorite
My favorite
My favorite

1/125

song
song
song
song
song
song
song

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

6
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [ ]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
PLAY

4/125

My favorite Album
Artist name
My favorite song 1
ENTER

00:10

04:35

WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz

RETURN

To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [ ]
button.
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
[
] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [
] button
twice.

Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RANDOM] button again.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] button repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the current server are
played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Note:
• If the message “No item” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.

113

TX-NR905_En.book Page 114 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.

Playing Music Files on a USB Device
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device. See page 111 for details on supported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.
AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

GAME/TV

Start Windows Media Player 11.
NET/USB

On the Library menu, select Media Sharing.
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.

AUX1

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
A list of devices that support PlaysForSure
appears.

ENU

ME N

+
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

4
5

Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver (see page 113).

RECEIVER

SLEEP

PM
TO

ENTER

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

TV VOL

MUTING

REC

PLAYLIST

RANDOM

Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.

Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the USB screen.

NET/USB

Note:
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.

0
USB

1/1

USB Storage

The USB indicator lights up if the AV
receiver is able to read the USB mass
storage device. It flashes if it cannot
read it.

3
NET/USB

114

Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 115 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued

4
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a USB mass
storage device, and then press
[ENTER].
A list of the device’s contents appears.
USB Storage

ENTER

1/15

Folder1
Folder2
01_Song_Track1.WMA
02_Song_Track2.WMA
03_Song_Track3.WMA
04_Song_Track4.WMA
05_Song_Track5.WMA
06_Song_Track6.WMA
07_Song_Track7.WMA
08_Song_Track8.WMA

To open a folder, use the Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select it, and then
press [ENTER].

5
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [ ]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
PLAY

4/15

USB Storage
02_Song_Track2.WMA
ENTER

00:10

--:--:--

WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz

RETURN

To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [ ] or Pause [ ] button, respectively.
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
[
] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [
] button
twice.

Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] button repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.

Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its
AC adapter to power it.
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and iPods containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices including the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.

115

TX-NR905_En.book Page 116 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued
Listening to Internet Radio

To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
receiver to a network with Internet access (see
page 112).
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by connecting to the AV receiver from your computer and
selecting stations in your Web browser.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.

NET/USB

3
ENTER

SE
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an empty item,
and then press the [SETUP] button.
The URL Input screen appears.

TUP

TV
INPUT

NET/USB

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER

SLEEP

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

Use the remote controller to
enter the URL of the Internet
radio station you want to listen
to.
Use the same method as for the Name
Edit function on page 104 to enter a
URL.
When you’ve finished, select
“OK,” and then press [ENTER].
The station appears in the list.
To update the station list, press
the [RETURN] button.

MUTING

OR:
REC

1
NET/USB

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the Internet Radio screen.

0
Internet Radio

1/20

e-onkyo radio

The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the network. It flashes if
a connection cannot be established.

116

On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
The browser connects to the AV
receiver and displays the same screen
as the AV receiver.
Select the Internet radio station
with your browser.
Notes:
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the Network screen (see
page 117).
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the AV
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s
IP address on Network screen.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 117 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued

Press [ENTER].
The station’s programs are displayed.
ENTER

6
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a program, and
then press [ENTER].
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
PLAY

ENTER

This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
What’s DHCP?

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices
to automatically configure themselves on a network.

1/45

iRadio station name
Streaming program name
01:29

Network Settings

--:--:--

MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz

RETURN

Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [ENTER] to
start playback.
Notes:
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator
lights up.
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable
modem, xDSL modem, etc).

What’s DNS?

The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
7.Hardware Setup

ENTER

1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
6.Network

117

TX-NR905_En.book Page 118 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

NET/USB—Continued

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. Network,”
and then press [ENTER].
The Network screen appears.
7-6.Network
MAC Address
xx : xx : xx : xx : xx : xx
Control
Enable
Port
60000
DHCP
Enable
IP Address
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
Subnet Mask
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
DNS Server
xxx . xxx . xxx . xxx
Proxy URL
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Proxy Port
xxxxx

ENTER

4
ENTER

5
SE

TUP

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the settings,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to set them.
To enter an IP address, select the setting, and then press [ENTER]. The
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can
then be used to enter numbers. Press
[ENTER] again to set the number.
The settings are explained on the next
page.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

DHCP
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select Disable, you must configure the IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings yourself.

IP Address
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided by your
ISP.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.

Subnet Mask
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).

Gateway
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.

DNS Server
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.

Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.

Mac Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.

Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
■ Port
This is the network port used for control over the network.

118

Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 119 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.

Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2

Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.

Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.

This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room

Main room
AV receiver

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

R
PRE OUT

AV receiver
Zone 2
ZONE2 R

ZONE2 L

IN
R

Receiver/
integrated amp
Zone 2
R

Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 122).

To use this setup, you must set the Speaker Type
Front B setting to Not Use (see page 51), and set the
Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (see page 121).
Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).

119

TX-NR905_En.book Page 120 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2 Video Output

Connecting Zone 3

The AV receiver features a composite video output for
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both
audio and video in that zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Main room
TV

Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.

Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room

AV receiver
ZONE 2
OUT

Zone 2
AV receiver
TV
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Note:
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from components connected to composite video inputs and
S-Video inputs.

R
PRE OUT

Zone 3
IN
R

Zone 2 12V Trigger
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2
12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that component turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.

120

Receiver/
integrated amp

Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 122).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 121 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Powered Zone 2 Setting

If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 119, you
must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out

Not Act
Fixed
Fixed

ENTER

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

TV
INPUT

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

ENTER

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

ENTER

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

SETUP

RECEIVER

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

5
REC

RECEIVER

SP B

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

TUP

2
ENTER

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Powered
Zone 2,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

TUP

Notes:
• When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals output sound, but the surround back speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the
surround back speakers output sound as normal.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

ENTER

121

TX-NR905_En.book Page 122 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings

If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
receiver.

1
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
SE

TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
SE

TUP

2
ENTER

This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

ZONE 3
ZONE 2
TONE
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO

AUDIO SEL

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX 2

AUX 1

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

ZONE 2
PHONES

OFF

LEVEL

TONE

HDMI OUT

STEREO

TUNING

THX

POWER

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

RETURN

AUX 2 INPUT

SETUP MIC

SETUP

USB
PRESET

CLEAR

OFF

DIGITAL INPUT

ZONE 3

LISTENING MODE

S VIDEO

ENTER

TUNING

VIDEO

L AUDIO R

DIGITAL

ENTER

OFF
,

3
ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out

Not Act
Fixed
Fixed

ENTER

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

ON
INPUT
SELECTOR

INPUT
CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

ZONE2

REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CABLE

CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

4
ENTER

ENTER

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Zone 2 Out” or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can be set on the AV
receiver.

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

SLEEP

PM
TO

ENU

ME N

+
CH

PREV
CH

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

RC-687M

122

MUTING

LEVEL–,
LEVEL+

TX-NR905_En.book Page 123 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Selecting an Input Source for Zones

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.

Remote
controller
ZONE3

On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE2

• On the North American model, you can select a different radio source for each room. For example, XM for
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.

Turning Off Zones

1
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the display.

AV receiver
ZONE 2

Remote
controller

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button.

ZONE3
ZONE2

On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE 3

AV receiver

On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.

Remote
controller
DVD

VCR/DVR

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

+10

The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.

CBL/SAT

AV receiver
ZONE 2

ZONE 2

On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selector appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.

ZONE 3

2
Remote
controller
STANDBY

AV receiver

On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[OFF] button.
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.

OFF

ZONE 3

Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selector button repeatedly. On the North American model,
you can also select XM or SIRIUS.
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,
are unavailable.
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.

Note:
• When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).

123

TX-NR905_En.book Page 124 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Remote
controller
ZONE3
ZONE2

LEVEL

AV receiver

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]
buttons.
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,
press the [LEVEL] button, and
then use the Up [ ] and Down
[ ] buttons.

Muting Zones
ZONE3
ZONE2

MUTING

On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press the [MUTING] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE 2] or
[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] button again.

Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2

1
AV receiver

On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE 2

Adjusting the Balance of Zones

1
AV receiver

On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

TONE

Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.

ZONE 3

TONE

Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Balance.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]
buttons to adjust the bass or treble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]
buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 122).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out setting is set to Fixed (page 122).

124

TX-NR905_En.book Page 125 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commercially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.

Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

IR Receiver
Connecting
block

IR IN

Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.

IR Receiver

Connecting
block

Remote controller

Main room

Inside
cabinet

Remote controller

Signal flow

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.

Zone 2/3
IR Receiver

Connecting
block

Signal flow

The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.

IR IN
AV receiver

IR OUT

IR Emitter

From the connecting block
Remote controller
Miniplug cable

Other component

Signal flow

OUT

AV receiver

The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
IR

Emitter
IN

Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT

AV receiver
Signal flow

125

TX-NR905_En.book Page 126 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 129).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 130).

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.

REMOTE MODE
VCR

DVD
CD

CDR/MD/DOCK

CABLE
SAT

STANDBY

Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Remote
indicator

STANDBY

Number
buttons

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

REMOTE
MODE

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

+
CH

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

SP B

LISTENING MODE
STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

RC-687M

126

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TAPE

TUNER

NET/USB

Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote controller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.

Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER], [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3], and [NET/USB]
REMOTE MODE buttons.
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

CBL/SAT

VOL

ENTER

DISC
ALBUM

TV VOL

DVD

VCR/DVR

TV I

MACRO

DVD

Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.

TV
INPUT

DVD

Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category.

• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder,
MD recorder or Onkyo RI Dock, enter the appropriate remote control code to the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 127 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via
Onkyo components that are connected via
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.

Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with an
cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 49 for details.
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.

Note:
• If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the
GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must
set the Input Display accordingly (see page 57).

Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.

1
REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5002: Onkyo DVD player with

CDR/MD/DOCK

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button that you want to
reset, press the TV [
] button.
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.

CABLE
SAT

• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6002: Onkyo CD player with
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with

2
REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo RI Dock with

CDR/MD/DOCK

CABLE
SAT

See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.

Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.

If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
, use
the following remote control codes:
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5001: Onkyo DVD player without
(default)
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6001: Onkyo CD player without

Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

1
RECEIVER

(default)

• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo RI Dock without

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the [STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.

STANDBY

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without

Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for controlling Onkyo DVD players and CD players, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.

2
RECEIVER

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.

127

TX-NR905_En.book Page 128 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV

■ Controlling a VCR
Press [VCR] first

Press [TV] first

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

TV
INPUT

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

GAME/TV

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

AUX1

MACRO
ZONE3

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

GAME/TV

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

CABLE

ZONE2

MEN

PREV
CH

ID E

TUP

E XI

RN
RE T U

DISPLAY

MUTING

8
7

CABLE

AUX1

INPUT

AUX2

TV CH

TAPE

TUNER

GAME/TV

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

VCR

RECEIVER

CABLE

PREV
CH

ID E

VOL

E XI

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

9
9

8
4

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

A [ON], [STANDBY], TV [

PREV
CH

B Number buttons
Enter numbers.

C [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*
Select channels on the TV.

D [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

E [TV INPUT]*
Selects the TV’s external inputs.

F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
Adjust the TV’s volume.

G [MUTING]
Mutes the TV.

H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the TV.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regardless of the currently selected remote
controller mode.

VOL

ENTER

E XI

ID E

RN
RE T U

TUP

DISPLAY

MUTING

REC

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

8
6
7

SP B

LISTENING MODE

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

STEREO

SURR

REPEAT

AUDIO

PURE A

DIRECT

THX

ALL ST

TEST TONE

CH SEL

LEVEL-

LEVEL+

SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

AUDIO SEL

L NIGHT

Re-EQ

VCR

DVD

HDD

VCR

DVD

HDD

RC-687M

Set the TV to On or Standby.

+
CH

5
8

MEN

U
MEN

DISC
ALBUM

SP B

STEREO

RC-687M

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP

P
TO

LISTENING MODE

STEREO

ZONE2

NET/USB

DIMMER

ENTER

ZONE3

SAT

+
CH

TV VOL

MACRO

TAPE/AMP

ME N

CDR/MD/DOCK

NET/USB

ENU

DISC
ALBUM

SP B

LISTENING MODE

128

DVD

SLEEP

RANDOM

PLAYLIST

SP A

ZONE2

8
REC

ZONE3

DIMMER

9
4

VOL

ENTER

CBL/SAT

REMOTE MODE

SAT

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

U
MEN

VCR

RECEIVER
SLEEP

P
TO

TV VOL

DVD

TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

VCR/DVR

CDR/MD/DOCK

NET/USB

SAT

MACRO

CDR/MD/DOCK
TV

STANDBY

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

DVD

REMOTE MODE

VCR

Press [CABLE] (SAT) first

TV
INPUT

REMOTE MODE
DVD

■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver

A [ON], [STANDBY]
Set the VCR to On or Standby.

B Number buttons
Enter numbers.

C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.

D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.

E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

F REC [ ]
Starts recording.

G Eject [ ]
Ejects the videocassette.

H [ ], [ ], [ ], [

], [ ]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.

I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the VCR.

A [ON], [STANDBY]
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
On or Standby.

B Number buttons
Enter numbers.

C [CLEAR]
Cancels functions.

D [CH +/–]
Selects satellite/cable channels.

E [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.

F [GUIDE]
Displays the program guide.

G [

], [ ]
Rewind and Fast forward.

H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the satellite/cable receiver.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 129 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands

If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
E
EV

ST E
TEON
T
L
SE
H
C
PE

TA
C
IS

C
-1
EO
VID

VD
D
PO

D
C

O
N
R O
T
TO H
SE
C P
ER E
LE R
N PR
SE E
TU
T UN
PU T
IN
P
U
PE
O
R
TA
G
VD
D
-2
EO
VID
IM

P
EE
SL

T
V
T
PU
IN

T
V
VO
L

CABLE

CDR/MD/DOCK

VCR

DVD

REMOTE MODE

DISPLAY

MEN

+
VOL

ENTER

ID E

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

TUP

NET/USB

SLEEP

ZONE2

SAT

ZONE3

DIMMER

PREV
CH

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK

VCR

REMOTE MODE

DISC
ALBUM

TV VOL

MACRO

U
MEN

CLEAR

P
TO

CABLE

+10

9
D. TUN

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

1, 4

8
NET/USB

RC-687M

To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.

7
PHONO

DVD

X1
AU

TUNER

TAPE

R/D

+
TV CH

3
AUX2

ER
W

CH
TI- T
UL PU
M IN

CBL/SAT

2
AUX1

VCR/DVR

DVD

GAME/TV

INPUT

RE
SUOD
M

D
DV

STANDBY

1 V
UN
ER
N
E/T
D.T R
M
TU
A 12
GA
3
8 B
CLE
4
S
NE
ZO
PE
T/U
NE
TA
2
0 11 TOR
7
NE
C
3
O
ZO
LE
ON
E O
E
PH
D
0 10 UT S CR
O
A
IVER P
M
K
D
CE
-- INP M 2
C OC
RE /AM EP
TE
O
D/D
PE LE
S
EM
R/M
TA
R
B
CD
R
T/US
1
NE
VC
--

About 2 to 6
inches (5–15 cm)

Remote
indicator

TIN

The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[ ] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 126) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.

E XI

RN
R E TU
MUTING

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the command, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.

NET/USB

SAT
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

Press the button you want to
learn the new command.

Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose command you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.

Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH
[+]/[–], Re-EQ, LIGHT.
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to
learn the command. In the TV remote control mode,
the remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [
]
buttons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to
learn the command will mean that you can also use the
TV [
] button to turn your TV on or off in TV
remote control mode.
• When you want to learn the commands from your
TV’s Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV
remote control mode and use the remote controller’s
CH [+/–] button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn
the commands. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] buttons are linked, so using the CH [+/–] button to learn
these commands will mean that you can also use the
TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV
remote control mode.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 127).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.

129

TX-NR905_En.book Page 130 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO buttons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
CD player.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.

Making Macros

Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].

When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the process will finish automatically.

Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.

Running Macros

Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.

Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the current remote controller
mode.

Remote
indicator
ON

STANDBY

DVD

VCR/DVR

CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

AUX1

AUX2

TV CH

TV
INPUT

TAPE

MACRO
1, 2, 3

TUNER

PHONO

NET/USB

D. TUN

+10

CLEAR

11
--/--- 10
INPUT SELECTOR

TV VOL

MACRO

ZONE3

REMOTE MODE

REMOTE
MODE

DVD

VCR

CABLE

ZONE2

CD
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB

SAT

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

DIMMER

RECEIVER

SLEEP

P
TO

U
M EN

ME N

Deleting Macros

+
CH
DISC
ALBUM

ENTER

VOL

1
1
REMOTE MODE
DVD

VCR

CDR/MD/DOCK

CABLE
SAT

NET/USB

While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote controller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.

RECEIVER

While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, press the MACRO button
whose macro you want to delete.

RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP

130

For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].

Press the MACRO button again.

TX-NR905_En.book Page 131 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
STANDBY/ON

VCR/DVR

Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.

Power
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact your Onkyo dealer.

Audio
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned to the input
selector (page 58).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 78).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 25).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume (page 68). The AV receiver is
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.

• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 76).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room
speakers (page 77).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 46).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 94–101).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 78).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV program, the sound will be concentrated in the center
speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 91).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all listening modes. Try another listening mode (page 79).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.

131

TX-NR905_En.book Page 132 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the surround back speakers produce no sound (page 119).
The subwoofer produces no sound
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 94).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speaker Type Front
A is set to Bi-Amp or BTL, or Speaker Type Front B
is set to Normal, Bi-Amp, or BTL (page 51).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the surround back speakers produce no sound (page 119).
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
The volume cannot be set to +18 dB (99)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 106).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 76 and 99), the maximum volume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 89).
The analog multichannel input doesn’t work
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 38).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 59).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 78).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.

132

About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately, you may not hear anything, in which case you should stop your player for
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals, sound may not be output immediately.

Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that each video component is properly connected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI OUT
outputs video signals.
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 52), and
select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54 to
watch composite video, S-Video, and component
video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No (page 52),
and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 56 to watch composite video and
S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT or HDMI OUT (page 34).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT
(page 34).

TX-NR905_En.book Page 133 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
Resolution setting is set to anything other than
Through (see page 52), no video is output by the
HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
The picture is distorted
• On non-North American models, specify the TV system used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 66.

Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 69).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.

Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity (page 15).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor (page 15).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 16).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 126).

• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 129).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 127).
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via
, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 126).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.

Recording
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, video
recording is not possible because no video signals are
output. Select another listening mode.

Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 16).
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (see page 57).

133

TX-NR905_En.book Page 134 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued
Music Server and Internet Radio
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver (page 111).
• Check the Network settings (page 117).
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver (page 111).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If the server is serving large music files to several networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
• If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
• Check the Network settings (page 117).

USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, playback may not be possible with some USB devices even
if they conform to the USB mass storage device class.

Others
The sound changes when I connect my headphones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio, in which case it stays the
same.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex setting to Main or Sub (page 92).
The
functions don’t work
• To use
, you must make an
connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally (page 49).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
functions
don’t work.
The AV receiver’s display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening mode is selected. Select another listening mode.
Components connected to the AV receiver’s AC
outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV receiver
is set to On or Standby
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable
(page 109), the AC outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver is set to On or Standby,
or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.
For North American and Australian models, set the AV
receiver to Standby before disconnecting the power
cord from the wall outlet. For other models, set the AV
receiver to Standby and the POWER switch to OFF
before disconnecting the power cord.

134

TX-NR905_En.book Page 135 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Specifications
Amplifier Section

General

Rated Output Power
North American:
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
180 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
European:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Asian:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)

Power Supply
North American:
European:
Asian:
Power Consumption
North American:
European and Asian:
Dimensions
(W × H × D)

Maximum Output Power
Asian:
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
Dynamic Power
400 W (3Ω, Front)
300 W (4Ω, Front)
180 W (8Ω, Front)
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
0.05% (Power Rated)
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Output Level and
Impedance
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
Phono Overload
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
Frequency Response
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
Tone Control
±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance
4Ω–16Ω

Weight
North American:
European and Asian:

Tuner Section
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
European and Asian: 87.5 MHz– 108.0 MHz

■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
530 kHz–1710 kHz
European and Asian: 522 kHz–1611 kHz

9.8 A
1000 W
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-5/8"× 18-1/16"
24.5 kg
54.0 lbs.
24.3 kg
53.6 lbs.

■ Video Input
HDMI
Component
Composite
S-Video

IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2

■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
Composite
S-Video

OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE2 OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT

■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs

Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB

AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Multichannel Inputs

COAXIAL (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3),
OPTICAL (IN 1, IN 2), DIGITAL
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
7.1 ch

■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs

OPTICAL (OUT)
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)

Multichannel Pre
Outputs
7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1
Speaker Outputs
ZONE2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE2 L
Phones
PHONES

■ Control Terminal
MIC
Ethernet
RS232
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out

Yes
1
1
1/1
1

■ Digital Tuner
North American:
Preset Channel

XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
40

Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.

135

TX-NR905_En.book Page 136 Wednesday, January 23, 2008 1:36 PM

Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/

HOMEPAGE
http://www.onkyo.com/

I0801-2

* 2 9 3 4 4 5 3 2 A *

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2008:01:23 15:43:40+09:00
Create Date                     : 2008:01:23 13:36:53Z
Page Count                      : 136
Creation Date                   : 2008:01:23 13:36:53Z
Mod Date                        : 2008:01:23 15:43:40+09:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Author                          : Onkyo
Metadata Date                   : 2008:01:23 15:43:40+09:00
Creator                         : Onkyo
Title                           : TX-NR905_En
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Onkyo Tx Nr905 Users Manual NR905_En

Onkyo-Tx-Nr905-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr905-owner-s-manual

TX-NR905 to the manual 4bb86f49-def7-d314-45e0-537842709375

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation